Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 25291:d9fa9f9ceb21
(delete-rectangle-line): Use line-end-position.
author | Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Mon, 16 Aug 1999 20:38:36 +0000 |
parents | 35674d7c4136 |
children | 4b75c26bd356 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
20708 | 2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 1998 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
22 #include <signal.h> | |
4696
1fc792473491
Include <config.h> instead of "config.h".
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
4551
diff
changeset
|
23 #include <config.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
764 | 40 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 41 #include "window.h" |
42 #include "commands.h" | |
43 #include "disptab.h" | |
44 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
45 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 46 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 47 #include "process.h" |
48 #include "keyboard.h" | |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
94 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 95 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
96 #endif | |
25012 | 97 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
98 | |
99 | |
100 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
101 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
102 | |
103 struct dim | |
104 { | |
105 int width; | |
106 int height; | |
107 }; | |
108 | |
109 | |
110 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
111 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
112 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
113 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 114 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
115 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
116 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
117 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
118 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
119 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
120 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
121 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
122 struct dim)); | |
123 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
124 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
125 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
126 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
127 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
128 int, int, struct dim)); | |
129 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int)); | |
130 static void swap_glyphs_in_rows P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
131 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
132 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
133 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
134 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
135 struct window *)); | |
136 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
137 struct window *)); | |
138 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
139 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
140 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
141 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
142 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
143 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
144 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
145 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
146 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
147 int, int)); | |
148 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
149 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
150 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
151 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 152 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
153 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 154 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
155 int)); | |
156 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
157 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
158 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
159 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
160 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); | |
161 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
162 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
163 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
164 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
165 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
166 struct glyph_row *)); | |
167 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
168 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
169 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
170 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
171 | |
172 | |
173 | |
174 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
175 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
176 scrolling. */ | |
177 | |
178 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
179 |
554 | 180 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 181 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 182 |
764 | 183 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 184 |
25012 | 185 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 186 |
187 int display_completed; | |
188 | |
25012 | 189 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
190 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 191 |
192 int visible_bell; | |
193 | |
764 | 194 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 195 |
196 int inverse_video; | |
197 | |
198 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
199 | |
200 int baud_rate; | |
201 | |
25012 | 202 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
203 is running. */ | |
314 | 204 |
205 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
206 | |
207 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 208 |
314 | 209 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
210 | |
25012 | 211 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
212 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 213 |
214 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 215 as a character code. |
216 | |
217 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
218 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 219 |
220 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
221 | |
222 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
223 | |
224 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
225 | |
25012 | 226 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
227 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
228 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
229 | |
314 | 230 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
231 |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
232 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table; |
25012 | 233 |
314 | 234 |
25012 | 235 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
236 variable always holds the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
237 | |
238 struct frame *selected_frame; | |
239 | |
240 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 241 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 242 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
243 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 244 |
245 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
246 | |
247 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
248 | |
249 FILE *termscript; | |
250 | |
251 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
252 | |
253 struct cm Wcm; | |
254 | |
255 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
256 | |
257 int delayed_size_change; | |
258 | |
259 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
260 | |
261 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
262 | |
263 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
264 | |
265 struct window *updated_window; | |
266 | |
267 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
268 | |
269 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
270 int updated_area; | |
271 | |
272 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
273 | |
274 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
275 | |
276 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
277 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
278 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
279 | |
280 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
281 | |
282 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
283 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
284 | |
285 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
286 int glyph_pool_count; | |
287 | |
288 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
289 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
290 | |
291 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
292 | |
293 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
294 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
295 | |
296 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
297 | |
298 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
299 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
300 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
301 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
302 loaded on demand. */ | |
303 | |
304 int fonts_changed_p; | |
305 | |
306 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
307 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
308 | |
309 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
310 | |
311 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
312 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
313 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
314 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
315 | |
316 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
317 | |
318 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
319 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
320 | |
321 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
322 | |
323 | |
324 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
325 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
326 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 327 |
328 void | |
329 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
330 char *from, *to; | |
331 int size; | |
332 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
333 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 334 return; |
335 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
336 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
337 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
338 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
339 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
340 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
341 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
342 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
343 else |
314 | 344 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
345 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
346 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 347 |
348 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
349 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
350 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
351 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
352 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
353 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 354 if (to - from < 64) |
355 { | |
356 do | |
357 *--endt = *--endf; | |
358 while (endf != from); | |
359 } | |
360 else | |
361 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
362 for (;;) |
314 | 363 { |
364 endt -= (to - from); | |
365 endf -= (to - from); | |
366 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
367 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
368 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
369 |
314 | 370 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
371 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
372 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
373 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 374 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
375 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 376 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
377 } | |
378 } | |
379 } | |
380 | |
25012 | 381 |
382 | |
383 /*********************************************************************** | |
384 Glyph Matrices | |
385 ***********************************************************************/ | |
386 | |
387 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
388 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
389 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
390 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
391 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
392 | |
393 struct glyph_matrix * | |
394 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
395 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
396 { | |
397 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
398 | |
399 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
400 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
401 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
402 | |
403 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
404 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
405 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
406 | |
407 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
408 result->pool = pool; | |
409 return result; | |
410 } | |
411 | |
412 | |
413 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
414 | |
415 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
416 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
417 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
418 pointer was passed to this function. | |
419 | |
420 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
421 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
422 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
423 | |
424 static void | |
425 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
426 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
427 { | |
428 if (matrix) | |
429 { | |
430 int i; | |
431 | |
432 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
433 allocated. */ | |
434 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
435 abort (); | |
436 | |
437 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
438 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
439 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
440 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
441 | |
442 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
443 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
444 xfree (matrix); | |
445 } | |
446 } | |
447 | |
448 | |
449 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
450 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
451 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
452 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
453 or a float. */ | |
454 | |
455 static int | |
456 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
457 struct window *w; | |
458 int total_glyphs; | |
459 Lisp_Object margin; | |
460 { | |
461 int n; | |
462 | |
463 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
464 { | |
465 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
466 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
467 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
468 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
469 } | |
470 else | |
471 n = 0; | |
472 | |
473 return n; | |
474 } | |
475 | |
476 | |
477 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
478 window sizes. | |
479 | |
480 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
481 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
482 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
483 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
484 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
485 | |
486 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
487 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
488 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
489 MATRIX->pool. | |
490 | |
491 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
492 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
493 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
494 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
495 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
496 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
497 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
498 | |
499 static void | |
500 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
501 struct window *w; | |
502 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
503 int x, y; | |
504 struct dim dim; | |
505 { | |
506 int i; | |
507 int new_rows; | |
508 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
509 int top_line_changed_p = 0; | |
510 int top_line_p = 0; | |
511 int left = -1, right = -1; | |
512 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
513 | |
514 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
515 if (w) | |
516 { | |
517 top_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_TOP_LINE_P (w); | |
518 top_line_changed_p = top_line_p != matrix->top_line_p; | |
519 } | |
520 matrix->top_line_p = top_line_p; | |
521 | |
522 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
523 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
524 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
525 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
526 { | |
527 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
528 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
529 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
530 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
531 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
532 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
533 | |
534 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
535 && !fonts_changed_p | |
536 && !top_line_changed_p | |
537 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
538 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
539 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
540 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
541 return; | |
542 } | |
543 | |
544 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
545 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
546 { | |
547 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
548 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
549 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
550 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
551 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
552 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
553 } | |
554 else | |
555 new_rows = 0; | |
556 | |
557 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
558 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
559 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
560 if (matrix->pool) | |
561 { | |
562 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
563 | |
564 if (w) | |
565 { | |
566 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
567 w->left_margin_width); | |
568 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
569 w->right_margin_width); | |
570 } | |
571 else | |
572 left = right = 0; | |
573 | |
574 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
575 { | |
576 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
577 | |
578 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
579 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
580 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
581 + x); | |
582 | |
583 if (w == NULL | |
584 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
585 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->top_line_p)) | |
586 { | |
587 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
588 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
589 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
590 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
591 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
592 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
593 } | |
594 else | |
595 { | |
596 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
597 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
598 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
599 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
600 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
601 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
602 } | |
603 } | |
604 | |
605 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
606 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
607 } | |
608 else | |
609 { | |
610 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
611 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
612 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
613 || new_rows | |
614 || top_line_changed_p | |
615 || marginal_areas_changed_p) | |
616 { | |
617 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
618 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
619 | |
620 while (row < end) | |
621 { | |
622 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
623 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
624 (dim.width | |
625 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
626 | |
627 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
628 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
629 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->top_line_p)) | |
630 { | |
631 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
632 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
633 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
634 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
635 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
636 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
637 } | |
638 else | |
639 { | |
640 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
641 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
642 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
643 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
644 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
645 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
646 } | |
647 ++row; | |
648 } | |
649 } | |
650 | |
651 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
652 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
653 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
654 } | |
655 | |
656 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
657 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
658 | |
659 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
660 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
661 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
662 when this function runs. */ | |
663 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
664 { | |
665 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
666 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
667 of the window. */ | |
668 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
669 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
670 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
671 { | |
672 i = 0; | |
673 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
674 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
675 < matrix->window_height)) | |
676 ++i; | |
677 | |
678 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
679 are invalidated. */ | |
680 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
681 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
682 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
683 | |
684 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
685 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
686 } | |
687 else | |
688 { | |
689 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
690 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
691 } | |
692 } | |
693 | |
694 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
695 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
696 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
697 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
698 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
699 | |
700 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
701 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
702 if (w) | |
703 { | |
704 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
705 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
706 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
707 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
708 } | |
709 } | |
710 | |
711 | |
712 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
713 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
714 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
715 below). */ | |
314 | 716 |
717 static void | |
25012 | 718 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
719 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
720 int start, end; | |
314 | 721 { |
25012 | 722 int i, j; |
723 | |
724 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
725 { | |
726 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
727 initialization. */ | |
728 struct glyph_row temp; | |
729 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
730 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
731 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
732 } | |
314 | 733 } |
734 | |
25012 | 735 |
736 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
737 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
738 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
739 row structures are moved around). | |
740 | |
741 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
742 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
743 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
744 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
745 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
746 rotating right. */ | |
747 | |
748 void | |
749 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
750 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
751 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 752 { |
25012 | 753 if (by < 0) |
754 { | |
755 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
756 by = -by; | |
757 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
758 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
759 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
760 } | |
761 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 762 { |
25012 | 763 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
764 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
765 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
766 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 767 } |
25012 | 768 } |
769 | |
770 | |
771 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
772 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
773 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
774 | |
775 void | |
776 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, | |
777 delta_bytes) | |
778 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
779 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
780 { | |
781 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
782 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
783 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
784 xassert (start <= end); | |
785 | |
786 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
787 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (matrix->rows + start, | |
788 delta, delta_bytes); | |
789 } | |
790 | |
791 | |
792 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
793 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
794 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
795 | |
796 void | |
797 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
798 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
799 int start, end; | |
800 int enabled_p; | |
801 { | |
802 xassert (start <= end); | |
803 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
804 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
805 | |
806 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
807 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
808 } | |
809 | |
810 | |
811 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
812 | |
813 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
814 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
815 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
816 enabled_p flag. | |
817 | |
818 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
819 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
820 | |
821 void | |
822 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
823 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
824 { | |
825 if (matrix) | |
314 | 826 { |
25012 | 827 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
828 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 829 } |
830 } | |
25012 | 831 |
832 | |
833 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
834 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
835 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
836 | |
837 void | |
838 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
839 struct window *w; | |
840 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
841 int start, end, dy; | |
842 { | |
843 int min_y, max_y; | |
844 | |
845 xassert (start <= end); | |
846 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
847 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
848 | |
849 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_TOP_LINE_HEIGHT (w); | |
850 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); | |
851 | |
852 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
853 { | |
854 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
855 | |
856 row->y += dy; | |
857 | |
858 if (row->y < min_y) | |
859 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
860 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
861 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
862 else | |
863 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
864 } | |
865 } | |
866 | |
867 | |
868 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
869 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
870 current matrix. */ | |
871 | |
872 void | |
873 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
874 register struct frame *f; | |
875 { | |
876 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
877 if (f->current_matrix) | |
878 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
879 | |
880 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
881 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
882 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
883 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
884 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
885 | |
886 /* Clear the matrix of the toolbar window, if any. */ | |
887 if (WINDOWP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
888 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window)->current_matrix); | |
889 | |
890 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
891 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
892 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
893 } | |
894 | |
895 | |
896 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 897 |
21514 | 898 void |
25012 | 899 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
900 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 901 { |
25012 | 902 if (f->desired_matrix) |
903 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
904 | |
905 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
906 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
907 | |
908 if (WINDOWP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
909 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
910 | |
911 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
912 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
913 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
914 } | |
915 | |
916 | |
917 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
918 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
919 | |
920 static void | |
921 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
922 struct window *w; | |
923 int desired_p; | |
924 { | |
925 while (w) | |
314 | 926 { |
25012 | 927 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
928 { | |
929 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
930 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
931 } | |
932 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 933 { |
25012 | 934 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
935 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
936 } | |
937 else | |
938 { | |
939 if (desired_p) | |
940 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
941 else | |
314 | 942 { |
25012 | 943 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
944 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 945 } |
25012 | 946 } |
947 | |
948 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
949 } | |
950 } | |
951 | |
952 | |
953 | |
954 /*********************************************************************** | |
955 Glyph Rows | |
956 | |
957 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
958 ***********************************************************************/ | |
959 | |
960 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
961 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
962 structure members. */ | |
963 | |
964 void | |
965 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
966 struct glyph_row *row; | |
967 { | |
968 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
969 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
970 | |
971 /* Save pointers. */ | |
972 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
973 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
974 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
975 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
976 | |
977 /* Clear. */ | |
978 *row = null_row; | |
979 | |
980 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
981 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
982 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
983 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
984 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
985 } | |
986 | |
987 | |
988 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
989 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
990 | |
991 void | |
992 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
993 struct window *w; | |
994 struct glyph_row *row; | |
995 int y; | |
996 { | |
997 int min_y, max_y; | |
998 | |
999 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_TOP_LINE_HEIGHT (w); | |
1000 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); | |
1001 | |
1002 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1003 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1004 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1005 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1006 |
1007 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1008 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1009 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1010 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1011 else | |
1012 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1013 | |
1014 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1015 } | |
1016 | |
1017 | |
1018 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1019 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1020 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1021 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1022 ends. */ | |
1023 | |
1024 void | |
1025 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1026 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1027 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1028 { | |
1029 int area, i; | |
1030 | |
1031 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1032 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1033 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1034 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1035 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1036 | |
1037 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1038 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1039 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1040 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1041 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1042 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1043 | |
1044 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1045 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1046 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1047 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1048 } | |
1049 | |
1050 | |
1051 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph | |
1052 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1053 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1054 | |
1055 static void | |
1056 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1057 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1058 { | |
1059 int area; | |
1060 | |
1061 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1062 { | |
1063 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1064 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1065 | |
1066 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1067 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1068 | |
1069 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1070 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1071 | |
1072 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1073 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1074 | |
1075 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1076 { | |
1077 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1078 initialization. */ | |
1079 struct glyph temp; | |
1080 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1081 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1082 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1083 ++glyph_a; | |
1084 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1085 } |
1086 } | |
1087 } | |
25012 | 1088 |
1089 | |
1090 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1091 | |
1092 static INLINE void | |
1093 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1094 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1095 { | |
1096 int i; | |
1097 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1098 { | |
1099 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1100 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1101 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1102 } | |
1103 } | |
1104 | |
1105 | |
1106 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1107 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1108 | |
1109 INLINE void | |
1110 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1111 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1112 { | |
1113 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1114 | |
1115 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1116 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1117 | |
1118 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1119 *to = *from; | |
1120 | |
1121 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1122 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1123 } | |
1124 | |
1125 | |
1126 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1127 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1128 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1129 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1130 | |
1131 void | |
1132 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1133 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1134 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1135 { | |
1136 int area; | |
1137 | |
1138 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1139 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1140 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1141 | |
1142 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1143 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1144 if (from->used[area]) | |
1145 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1146 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1147 | |
1148 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
1149 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); | |
1150 } | |
1151 | |
1152 | |
1153 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1154 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1155 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1156 a memory leak. */ | |
1157 | |
1158 static INLINE void | |
1159 assign_row (to, from) | |
1160 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1161 { | |
1162 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1163 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1164 } | |
1165 | |
1166 | |
1167 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1168 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1169 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1170 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1171 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1172 | |
1173 static int | |
1174 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1175 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1176 { | |
1177 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1178 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1179 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1180 | |
1181 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1182 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1183 } | |
1184 | |
1185 | |
1186 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice | |
1187 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1188 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1189 | |
1190 static struct glyph_row * | |
1191 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1192 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1193 int row; | |
1194 { | |
1195 int i; | |
1196 | |
1197 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1198 | |
1199 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1200 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1201 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1202 break; | |
1203 | |
1204 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1205 } | |
1206 | |
1207 | |
1208 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1209 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1210 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1211 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1212 | |
1213 void | |
1214 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1215 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1216 { | |
1217 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1218 { | |
1219 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1220 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1221 } | |
1222 } | |
1223 | |
1224 | |
1225 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1226 | |
1227 int | |
1228 line_hash_code (row) | |
1229 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1230 { | |
1231 int hash = 0; | |
1232 | |
1233 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1234 { | |
1235 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1236 { | |
1237 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1238 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1239 hash = -1; | |
1240 } | |
1241 else | |
1242 { | |
1243 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1244 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1245 | |
1246 while (glyph < end) | |
1247 { | |
1248 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*glyph); | |
1249 if (must_write_spaces) | |
1250 g -= SPACEGLYPH; | |
1251 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + g; | |
1252 ++glyph; | |
1253 } | |
1254 | |
1255 if (hash == 0) | |
1256 hash = 1; | |
1257 } | |
1258 } | |
1259 | |
1260 return hash; | |
1261 } | |
1262 | |
1263 | |
1264 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1265 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1266 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1267 | |
1268 static unsigned int | |
1269 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1270 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1271 int vpos; | |
1272 { | |
1273 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1274 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1275 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1276 int len; | |
1277 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1278 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1279 | |
1280 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1281 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1282 { | |
1283 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1284 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1285 --end; | |
1286 | |
1287 /* All blank line. */ | |
1288 if (end == beg) | |
1289 return 0; | |
1290 | |
1291 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1292 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1293 ++beg; | |
1294 } | |
1295 | |
1296 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1297 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1298 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1299 len = end - beg; | |
1300 else | |
1301 { | |
1302 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1303 in LEN. */ | |
1304 len = 0; | |
1305 while (beg < end) | |
1306 { | |
1307 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1308 | |
1309 if (GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) | |
1310 len += 1; | |
1311 else | |
1312 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1313 | |
1314 ++beg; | |
1315 } | |
1316 } | |
1317 | |
1318 return len; | |
1319 } | |
1320 | |
1321 | |
1322 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1323 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1324 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
1325 visibility. */ | |
1326 | |
1327 static INLINE int | |
1328 row_equal_p (w, a, b) | |
1329 struct window *w; | |
1330 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1331 { | |
1332 if (a == b) | |
1333 return 1; | |
1334 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1335 return 0; | |
1336 else | |
1337 { | |
1338 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1339 int area; | |
1340 | |
1341 /* Compare glyphs. */ | |
1342 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1343 { | |
1344 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1345 return 0; | |
1346 | |
1347 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1348 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1349 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1350 | |
1351 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1352 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1353 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1354 | |
1355 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1356 return 0; | |
1357 } | |
1358 | |
1359 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1360 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1361 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1362 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1363 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1364 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1365 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1366 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1367 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1368 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1369 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1370 || a->x != b->x | |
1371 /* Different height. */ | |
1372 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1373 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1374 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1375 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1376 return 0; | |
1377 } | |
1378 | |
1379 return 1; | |
1380 } | |
1381 | |
1382 | |
314 | 1383 |
25012 | 1384 /*********************************************************************** |
1385 Glyph Pool | |
1386 | |
1387 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1388 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1389 | |
1390 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1391 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1392 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1393 | |
1394 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1395 new_glyph_pool () | |
1396 { | |
1397 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1398 | |
1399 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1400 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1401 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1402 | |
1403 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1404 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1405 | |
1406 return result; | |
1407 } | |
1408 | |
1409 | |
1410 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1411 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1412 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1413 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1414 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1415 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1416 | |
1417 static void | |
1418 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1419 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1420 { | |
1421 if (pool) | |
1422 { | |
1423 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1424 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1425 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1426 | |
1427 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1428 xfree (pool); | |
1429 } | |
1430 } | |
1431 | |
1432 | |
1433 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1434 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1435 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1436 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1437 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1438 | |
1439 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1440 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1441 | |
1442 static int | |
1443 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1444 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1445 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1446 { | |
1447 int needed; | |
1448 int changed_p; | |
1449 | |
1450 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1451 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1452 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1453 | |
1454 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1455 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1456 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1457 { | |
1458 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1459 | |
1460 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1461 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1462 else | |
1463 { | |
1464 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1465 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1466 } | |
1467 | |
1468 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1469 } | |
1470 | |
1471 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1472 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1473 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1474 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1475 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1476 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1477 | |
1478 return changed_p; | |
1479 } | |
1480 | |
1481 | |
1482 | |
1483 /*********************************************************************** | |
1484 Debug Code | |
1485 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1486 | |
1487 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1488 | |
1489 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a | |
1490 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1491 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1492 MATRIX. */ | |
1493 | |
1494 void | |
1495 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1496 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1497 { | |
1498 int i, j; | |
1499 | |
1500 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1501 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1502 xassert (i == j | |
1503 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1504 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1505 } | |
1506 | |
1507 | |
1508 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1509 | |
1510 struct glyph_row * | |
1511 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1512 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1513 int row; | |
1514 { | |
1515 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1516 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1517 | |
1518 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1519 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1520 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1521 #if 0 |
25012 | 1522 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1523 #endif | |
1524 | |
1525 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1526 } | |
1527 | |
1528 | |
1529 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1530 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1531 nevertheless. */ | |
1532 | |
1533 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1534 window W. */ | |
1535 | |
1536 static void | |
1537 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1538 struct window *w; |
1539 { | |
25012 | 1540 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1541 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1542 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1543 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1544 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1545 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1546 int c; | |
1547 | |
1548 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1549 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1550 return; | |
1551 | |
1552 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1553 | |
1554 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1555 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1556 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1557 { | |
1558 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1559 | |
1560 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1561 last_text_row = row; | |
1562 | |
1563 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1564 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1565 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1566 | |
1567 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1568 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1569 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1570 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1571 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1572 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1573 | |
1574 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1575 of next row. */ | |
1576 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1577 { | |
1578 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1579 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1580 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1581 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1582 } | |
1583 row = next; | |
1584 } | |
1585 | |
1586 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1587 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1588 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1589 } | |
1590 | |
1591 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1592 | |
1593 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1594 | |
1595 | |
1596 | |
1597 /********************************************************************** | |
1598 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1599 **********************************************************************/ | |
1600 | |
1601 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1602 redisplay | |
1603 | |
1604 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1605 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1606 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1607 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1608 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1609 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1610 performed. | |
1611 | |
1612 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1613 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1614 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1615 | |
1616 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1617 | |
1618 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1619 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1620 | |
1621 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1622 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1623 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1624 | |
1625 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1626 function. | |
1627 | |
1628 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1629 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1630 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1631 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1632 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1633 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1634 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1635 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1636 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1637 | |
1638 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1639 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1640 necessary. | |
1641 | |
1642 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1643 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1644 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1645 windows in the sequence. | |
1646 | |
1647 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1648 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1649 | | | | | | |
1650 | | | | | |
1651 +---------+ | | result height | |
1652 | +---------+ | |
1653 | | | | |
1654 +----------+ --- | |
1655 | |
1656 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1657 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1658 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1659 | |
1660 |<---- result width -->| | |
1661 +---------+ --- | |
1662 | | | | |
1663 | | | | |
1664 +---------+--+ | | |
1665 | | | | |
1666 | | result height | |
1667 | | | |
1668 +------------+---------+ | | |
1669 | | | | |
1670 | | | | |
1671 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1672 | |
1673 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1674 allocated. */ | |
1675 | |
1676 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1677 | |
1678 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1679 size. */ | |
1680 | |
1681 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1682 | |
1683 static struct dim | |
1684 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1685 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1686 Lisp_Object window; | |
1687 int x, y; | |
1688 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1689 int dim_only_p; | |
1690 int *window_change_flags; | |
1691 { | |
1692 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1693 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1694 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1695 struct dim total; | |
1696 struct dim dim; | |
1697 struct window *w; | |
1698 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1699 | |
1700 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1701 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1702 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1703 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1704 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1705 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1706 in_horz_combination_p | |
1707 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1708 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1709 | |
1710 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1711 do | |
1712 { | |
1713 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1714 | |
1715 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1716 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1717 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1718 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1719 dim_only_p, | |
1720 window_change_flags); | |
1721 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1722 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1723 dim_only_p, | |
1724 window_change_flags); | |
1725 else | |
1726 { | |
1727 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1728 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1729 { | |
1730 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1731 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1732 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1733 } | |
1734 | |
1735 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1736 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
1737 dim.width = w->width; | |
1738 dim.height = w->height; | |
1739 | |
1740 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1741 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1742 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1743 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1744 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1745 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1746 w->right_margin_width) | |
1747 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1748 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1749 w->left_margin_width) | |
1750 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1751 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1752 | |
1753 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1754 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1755 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1756 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1757 necessary. */ | |
1758 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1759 { | |
1760 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1761 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1762 } | |
1763 } | |
1764 | |
1765 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1766 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1767 below W. */ | |
1768 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1769 x += dim.width; | |
1770 else | |
1771 y += dim.height; | |
1772 | |
1773 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1774 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1775 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1776 | |
1777 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1778 window = w->next; | |
1779 } | |
1780 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1781 | |
1782 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1783 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1784 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1785 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1786 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1787 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1788 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1789 { | |
1790 total.width = x - x0; | |
1791 total.height = hmax; | |
1792 } | |
1793 else | |
1794 { | |
1795 total.width = wmax; | |
1796 total.height = y - y0; | |
1797 } | |
1798 | |
1799 return total; | |
1800 } | |
1801 | |
1802 | |
1803 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1804 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1805 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1806 | |
1807 static void | |
1808 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1809 struct window *w; | |
1810 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1811 { | |
1812 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1813 | |
1814 while (w) | |
314 | 1815 { |
25012 | 1816 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1817 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1818 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1819 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1820 else | |
314 | 1821 { |
25012 | 1822 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1823 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1824 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1825 struct dim dim; | |
1826 | |
1827 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1828 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1829 { |
25012 | 1830 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1831 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1832 } |
25012 | 1833 |
1834 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1835 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1836 / ch_dim.width) | |
1837 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1838 + 2 | |
1839 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1840 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1841 + 1 + 1); | |
1842 | |
1843 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1844 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1845 / ch_dim.height) | |
1846 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1847 bottom of the window. */ | |
1848 + 2 | |
1849 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1850 + 2); | |
1851 | |
1852 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1853 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1854 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1855 } | |
1856 | |
1857 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1858 } | |
1859 } | |
1860 | |
1861 | |
1862 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1863 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1864 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1865 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1866 | |
1867 void | |
1868 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1869 struct frame *f; | |
1870 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1871 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1872 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1873 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1874 |
25012 | 1875 if (f) |
1876 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1877 else | |
1878 { | |
1879 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1880 | |
1881 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1882 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1883 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1884 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1885 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1886 } |
1887 | |
1888 | |
1889 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1890 | |
1891 To be called from init_display. | |
1892 | |
1893 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1894 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1895 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1896 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1897 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1898 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1899 | |
1900 static void | |
1901 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1902 { | |
1903 struct window *root = XWINDOW (selected_frame->root_window); | |
1904 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); | |
1905 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (selected_frame); | |
1906 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (selected_frame); | |
1907 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (selected_frame); | |
1908 | |
1909 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1910 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1911 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
1912 set_window_height (selected_frame->root_window, | |
1913 frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); | |
1914 | |
1915 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1916 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1917 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1918 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1919 | |
1920 adjust_frame_glyphs (selected_frame); | |
1921 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; | |
1922 } | |
1923 | |
1924 | |
1925 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1926 | |
1927 static void | |
1928 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1929 struct frame *f; | |
1930 { | |
1931 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1932 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1933 else | |
1934 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1935 | |
1936 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1937 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1938 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1939 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1940 | |
1941 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1942 } | |
1943 | |
1944 | |
1945 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1946 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1947 | |
1948 static void | |
1949 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1950 struct frame *f; | |
1951 { | |
1952 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1953 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1954 int pool_changed_p; | |
1955 int window_change_flags; | |
1956 int top_window_y; | |
1957 | |
1958 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
1959 return; | |
1960 | |
1961 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
1962 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
1963 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
1964 | |
1965 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
1966 | |
1967 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
1968 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
1969 { | |
1970 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1971 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1972 } | |
1973 | |
1974 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
1975 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1976 { | |
1977 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1978 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1979 } | |
1980 | |
1981 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
1982 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
1983 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
1984 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
1985 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
1986 matrix. */ | |
1987 window_change_flags = 0; | |
1988 matrix_dim | |
1989 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
1990 0, top_window_y, | |
1991 ch_dim, 1, | |
1992 &window_change_flags); | |
1993 | |
1994 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
1995 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
1996 | |
1997 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
1998 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
1999 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2000 | |
2001 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2002 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2003 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2004 { | |
2005 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2006 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2007 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2008 &window_change_flags); | |
2009 | |
2010 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2011 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2012 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2013 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2014 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2015 | |
2016 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2017 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2018 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2019 | |
2020 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2021 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2022 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2023 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2024 } | |
2025 } | |
2026 | |
2027 | |
2028 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2029 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2030 | |
2031 static void | |
2032 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2033 struct frame *f; | |
2034 { | |
2035 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2036 struct window *w; | |
2037 | |
2038 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2039 | |
2040 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2041 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2042 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2043 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2044 #else | |
2045 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2046 #endif | |
2047 | |
2048 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2049 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2050 ch_dim); | |
2051 | |
2052 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2053 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2054 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2055 { | |
2056 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2057 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2058 { | |
2059 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2060 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2061 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2062 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2063 } | |
2064 else | |
2065 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2066 | |
2067 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2068 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2069 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2070 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2071 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2072 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2073 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2074 } | |
2075 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2076 | |
2077 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the toolbar window. If we don't | |
2078 have a toolbar window yet, make one. */ | |
2079 if (NILP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
2080 { | |
2081 f->toolbar_window = make_window (); | |
2082 w = XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window); | |
2083 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2084 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2085 } | |
2086 else | |
2087 w = XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window); | |
2088 | |
2089 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2090 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2091 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOLBAR_LINES (f)); | |
2092 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2093 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2094 } | |
2095 | |
2096 | |
2097 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2098 | |
2099 The global variables echo_area_glyphs and previous_echo_area_glyphs | |
2100 may be pointing to the frames message buffer and must be relocated | |
2101 if the buffer is reallocated. | |
2102 | |
2103 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2104 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2105 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2106 | |
2107 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2108 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2109 | |
2110 static void | |
2111 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2112 struct frame *f; | |
2113 { | |
2114 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2115 | |
2116 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2117 { | |
2118 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2119 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2120 | |
2121 if (buffer == echo_area_glyphs) | |
2122 echo_area_glyphs = new_buffer; | |
2123 if (buffer == previous_echo_glyphs) | |
2124 previous_echo_glyphs = new_buffer; | |
2125 | |
2126 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2127 } | |
2128 else | |
2129 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2130 } | |
2131 | |
2132 | |
2133 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2134 | |
2135 static void | |
2136 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2137 struct frame *f; | |
2138 { | |
2139 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2140 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2141 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2142 } | |
2143 | |
2144 | |
2145 | |
2146 /********************************************************************** | |
2147 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2148 **********************************************************************/ | |
2149 | |
2150 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2151 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2152 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2153 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2154 | |
2155 void | |
2156 free_glyphs (f) | |
2157 struct frame *f; | |
2158 { | |
2159 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2160 { | |
2161 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; | |
2162 | |
2163 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2164 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2165 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2166 | |
2167 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2168 glyph matrices. */ | |
2169 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2170 { | |
2171 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2172 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2173 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2174 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2175 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2176 } | |
2177 | |
2178 /* Free the toolbar window and its glyph matrices. */ | |
2179 if (!NILP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
2180 { | |
2181 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window); | |
2182 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2183 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2184 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2185 f->toolbar_window = Qnil; | |
2186 } | |
2187 | |
2188 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2189 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2190 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2191 { | |
2192 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2193 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2194 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2195 } | |
2196 | |
2197 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2198 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2199 { | |
2200 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2201 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2202 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2203 } |
2204 } | |
2205 } | |
2206 | |
25012 | 2207 |
2208 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2209 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2210 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2211 | |
2212 void | |
2213 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2214 struct window *w; | |
2215 { | |
2216 while (w) | |
2217 { | |
2218 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2219 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2220 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2221 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2222 else | |
2223 { | |
2224 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2225 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2226 W. */ | |
2227 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2228 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2229 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2230 } | |
2231 | |
2232 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2233 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2234 } | |
2235 } | |
2236 | |
2237 | |
2238 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2239 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2240 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2241 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2242 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2243 void |
25012 | 2244 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2245 { |
25012 | 2246 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2247 | |
2248 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2249 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2250 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2251 | |
2252 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2253 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2254 abort (); | |
2255 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2256 abort (); | |
2257 } | |
2258 | |
2259 | |
2260 | |
2261 /********************************************************************** | |
2262 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2263 **********************************************************************/ | |
2264 | |
2265 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2266 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2267 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2268 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2269 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2270 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2271 window matrices in this section. | |
2272 | |
2273 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2274 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2275 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2276 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2277 | |
2278 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2279 | desired | desired | | |
2280 | | | | |
2281 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2282 | current | | |
2283 | | | |
2284 +----------------------------------+ | |
2285 | |
2286 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2287 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2288 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2289 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2290 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2291 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2292 | |
2293 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2294 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2295 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2296 enabled. | |
2297 | |
2298 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2299 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2300 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2301 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2302 | |
2303 This problem is solved like this: | |
2304 | |
2305 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2306 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2307 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2308 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2309 automatically. | |
2310 | |
2311 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2312 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2313 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2314 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2315 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2316 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2317 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2318 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2319 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2320 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2321 | |
2322 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2323 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2324 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2325 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2326 | |
2327 static void | |
2328 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2329 struct frame *f; | |
2330 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2331 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2332 |
25012 | 2333 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2334 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2335 | |
2336 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2337 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2338 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2339 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2340 | |
2341 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2342 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2343 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2344 } | |
2345 | |
2346 | |
2347 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2348 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2349 | |
2350 static void | |
2351 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2352 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2353 struct window *w; | |
2354 { | |
2355 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2356 { |
25012 | 2357 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2358 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2359 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2360 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2361 else | |
2362 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2363 | |
2364 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2365 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2366 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2367 |
25012 | 2368 |
2369 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2370 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2371 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2372 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2373 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2374 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2375 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2376 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2377 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2378 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2379 | |
2380 static void | |
2381 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2382 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2383 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2384 { |
25012 | 2385 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2386 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2387 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2388 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2389 | |
2390 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2391 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2392 { | |
2393 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2394 | |
2395 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2396 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2397 { | |
2398 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2399 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2400 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2401 : '|'); | |
2402 } | |
2403 } | |
2404 else | |
2405 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2406 | |
2407 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2408 frame matrix. */ | |
2409 window_y = 0; | |
2410 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2411 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2412 { |
25012 | 2413 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2414 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
2415 | |
2416 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2417 window row. */ | |
2418 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2419 | |
2420 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2421 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
2422 | |
2423 if (window_matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2424 { |
25012 | 2425 /* We have to copy W's current matrix. Copy window |
2426 row to frame row. */ | |
2427 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], | |
2428 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2429 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2430 } | |
2431 else | |
2432 { | |
2433 /* Copy W's desired matrix. */ | |
2434 | |
2435 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent | |
2436 windows. */ | |
2437 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2438 { | |
2439 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2440 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2441 } | |
2442 | |
2443 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that | |
2444 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2445 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2446 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2447 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2448 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2449 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2450 { |
25012 | 2451 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2452 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2453 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2454 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2455 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2456 | |
2457 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2458 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2459 | |
2460 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2461 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2462 } |
25012 | 2463 |
2464 /* Now, we are sure that window row window_y is a slice of | |
2465 the frame row frame_y. But, lets check that assumption. */ | |
2466 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); | |
2467 | |
2468 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because | |
2469 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2470 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2471 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2472 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2473 #endif |
25012 | 2474 } |
2475 | |
2476 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2477 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2478 can be done simply. */ | |
2479 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2480 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2481 | |
2482 /* Or in flags. */ | |
2483 frame_row->enabled_p |= window_row->enabled_p; | |
2484 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; | |
2485 | |
2486 /* Next row. */ | |
2487 ++window_y; | |
2488 ++frame_y; | |
2489 } | |
2490 } | |
2491 | |
2492 | |
2493 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2494 | |
2495 Each row has the form: | |
2496 | |
2497 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2498 | left | text | right | | |
2499 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2500 | |
2501 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2502 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2503 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2504 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2505 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2506 | |
2507 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2508 | |
2509 static void | |
2510 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2511 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2512 { | |
2513 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2514 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2515 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2516 } | |
2517 | |
2518 | |
2519 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2520 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2521 | |
2522 static void | |
2523 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2524 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2525 int area; | |
2526 { | |
2527 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2528 { | |
2529 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2530 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2531 | |
2532 while (text < end) | |
2533 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2534 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2535 } | |
2536 } | |
2537 | |
2538 | |
2539 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2540 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2541 | |
2542 static void | |
2543 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2544 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2545 int upto; | |
2546 { | |
2547 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2548 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2549 | |
2550 while (i < upto) | |
2551 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2552 | |
2553 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2554 } | |
2555 | |
2556 | |
2557 | |
2558 /********************************************************************** | |
2559 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2560 **********************************************************************/ | |
2561 | |
2562 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2563 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2564 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2565 | |
2566 static INLINE void | |
2567 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2568 struct frame *f; | |
2569 { | |
2570 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2571 } | |
2572 | |
2573 | |
2574 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2575 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2576 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2577 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2578 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2579 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2580 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2581 | |
2582 static INLINE void | |
2583 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2584 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2585 int row; | |
2586 { | |
2587 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2588 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
2589 | |
2590 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2591 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2592 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2593 | |
2594 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2595 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
2596 | |
2597 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2598 for window matrices. */ | |
2599 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2600 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2601 } | |
2602 | |
2603 | |
2604 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2605 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2606 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2607 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2608 | |
2609 static void | |
2610 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2611 struct window *w; | |
2612 int frame_row; | |
2613 { | |
2614 while (w) | |
2615 { | |
2616 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2617 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2618 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2619 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2620 else | |
2621 { | |
2622 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2623 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2624 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2625 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2626 | |
2627 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2628 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2629 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2630 { |
25012 | 2631 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2632 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2633 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2634 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2635 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2636 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2637 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2638 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2639 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2640 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2641 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2642 } |
25012 | 2643 |
2644 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2645 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2646 } |
25012 | 2647 |
2648 | |
2649 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2650 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2651 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2652 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2653 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2654 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2655 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2656 | |
2657 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2658 | |
2659 void | |
2660 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2661 retained_p) | |
2662 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2663 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2664 int *copy_from; | |
2665 char *retained_p; | |
2666 { | |
2667 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2668 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2669 | |
2670 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2671 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2672 | |
2673 int i; | |
2674 | |
2675 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2676 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2677 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2678 | |
2679 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2680 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2681 { | |
2682 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2683 | |
2684 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2685 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2686 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2687 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2688 | |
2689 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2690 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2691 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2692 } | |
2693 | |
2694 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2695 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2696 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2697 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2698 } | |
2699 | |
2700 | |
2701 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after | |
2702 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2703 | |
2704 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2705 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2706 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2707 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2708 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2709 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2710 which is empty. */ | |
2711 | |
2712 static void | |
2713 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2714 struct window *w; | |
2715 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2716 int *copy_from; | |
2717 char *retained_p; | |
2718 { | |
2719 while (w) | |
2720 { | |
2721 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2722 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2723 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2724 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2725 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2726 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2727 else | |
2728 { | |
2729 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2730 matrix m. */ | |
2731 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
2732 | |
2733 int i; | |
2734 | |
2735 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2736 | |
2737 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2738 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2739 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2740 | |
2741 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2742 { | |
2743 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2744 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2745 | |
2746 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2747 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2748 | |
2749 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2750 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2751 | |
2752 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2753 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2754 | |
2755 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2756 int from_inside_window_p | |
2757 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2758 | |
2759 if (from_inside_window_p) | |
2760 { | |
2761 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2762 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ | |
2763 int to_inside_window_p | |
2764 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; | |
2765 #endif | |
2766 | |
2767 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2768 int enabled_before_p; | |
2769 | |
2770 /* If not both lines inside the window, we have a | |
2771 serious problem. */ | |
2772 xassert (to_inside_window_p); | |
2773 | |
2774 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2775 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2776 that. */ | |
2777 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2778 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2779 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2780 | |
2781 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2782 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2783 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2784 } | |
2785 } | |
2786 | |
2787 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2788 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2789 } | |
2790 | |
2791 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2792 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2793 } | |
2794 } | |
2795 | |
2796 | |
2797 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2798 | |
2799 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2800 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2801 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2802 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2803 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2804 |
21514 | 2805 void |
25012 | 2806 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2807 struct window *w; |
2808 { | |
25012 | 2809 while (w) |
2810 { | |
2811 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2812 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2813 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2814 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2815 else | |
2816 { | |
2817 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2818 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2819 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2820 } | |
2821 | |
2822 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2823 } | |
2824 } | |
2825 | |
2826 | |
2827 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2828 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2829 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2830 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2831 | |
2832 static void | |
2833 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2834 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2835 { | |
2836 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2837 int i = 0; | |
2838 | |
2839 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2840 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2841 | |
2842 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2843 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2844 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2845 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2846 { | |
2847 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2848 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2849 abort (); | |
2850 ++i, ++j; | |
2851 } | |
2852 } | |
2853 | |
2854 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2855 | |
2856 | |
2857 | |
2858 /********************************************************************** | |
2859 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
2860 **********************************************************************/ | |
2861 | |
2862 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2863 | |
2864 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
2865 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2866 | |
2867 static int | |
2868 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
2869 struct window *w; | |
2870 int vpos; | |
2871 { | |
2872 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2873 | |
2874 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2875 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
2876 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
2877 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2878 return vpos; | |
2879 } | |
2880 | |
2881 | |
2882 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
2883 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2884 | |
2885 static int | |
2886 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
2887 struct window *w; | |
2888 int hpos; | |
2889 { | |
2890 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2891 | |
2892 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2893 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
2894 return hpos; | |
314 | 2895 } |
25012 | 2896 |
2897 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
2898 | |
2899 | |
314 | 2900 |
25012 | 2901 /********************************************************************** |
2902 Redrawing Frames | |
2903 **********************************************************************/ | |
2904 | |
2905 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
2906 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
2907 (frame) | |
2908 Lisp_Object frame; | |
2909 { | |
2910 struct frame *f; | |
2911 | |
2912 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
2913 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
2914 | |
2915 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
2916 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
2917 called so early here). */ | |
2918 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
2919 return Qnil; | |
2920 | |
2921 update_begin (f); | |
2922 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
2923 set_terminal_modes (); | |
2924 clear_frame (); | |
2925 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
2926 update_end (f); | |
2927 fflush (stdout); | |
2928 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
2929 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
2930 its redisplay done. */ | |
2931 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
2932 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
2933 f->garbaged = 0; | |
2934 return Qnil; | |
2935 } | |
2936 | |
2937 | |
2938 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
2939 function redraw-frame. */ | |
2940 | |
2941 void | |
2942 redraw_frame (f) | |
2943 struct frame *f; | |
2944 { | |
2945 Lisp_Object frame; | |
2946 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
2947 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2948 } | |
2949 | |
2950 | |
2951 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
2952 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
2953 () | |
2954 { | |
2955 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
2956 | |
2957 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2958 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
2959 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2960 | |
2961 return Qnil; | |
2962 } | |
2963 | |
2964 | |
2965 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
2966 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
2967 | |
2968 void | |
2969 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
2970 { | |
2971 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
2972 | |
2973 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2974 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
2975 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
2976 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2977 } | |
2978 | |
2979 | |
2980 | |
2981 /*********************************************************************** | |
2982 Direct Operations | |
2983 ***********************************************************************/ | |
2984 | |
2985 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
2986 | |
2987 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
2988 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
2989 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
2990 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
2991 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
2992 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
2993 | |
2994 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
2995 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
2996 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
2997 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 2998 |
2999 int | |
3000 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
3001 int g; | |
3002 { | |
25012 | 3003 register struct frame *f = selected_frame; |
3004 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); | |
3005 struct it it, it2; | |
3006 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3007 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3008 int n; | |
3009 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3010 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3011 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3012 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3013 int added_width; | |
3014 struct text_pos pos; | |
3015 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3016 | |
3017 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3018 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3019 | |
3020 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3021 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3022 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3023 || fonts_changed_p | |
3024 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3025 || face_change_count | |
3026 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3027 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3028 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3029 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3030 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
3031 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) | |
3032 && (echo_area_glyphs || STRINGP (echo_area_message))) | |
3033 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt | |
3034 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3035 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3036 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3037 || (overwrite_p | |
3038 && PT != ZV | |
3039 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3040 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3041 || g == '\t' | |
3042 || g == '\n' | |
3043 || g == '\r' | |
3044 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3045 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3046 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3047 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3048 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3049 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3050 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3051 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3052 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3053 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3054 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3055 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3056 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3057 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3058 return 0; | |
3059 | |
3060 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3061 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3062 position. */ | |
3063 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3064 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
3065 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos); | |
3066 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, | |
3067 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3068 | |
3069 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3070 | |
3071 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3072 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3073 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
3074 if (it.show_trailing_whitespace_p | |
3075 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3076 { | |
3077 struct glyph *last; | |
3078 | |
3079 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3080 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3081 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
3082 && last->u.ch.code == ' ')) | |
3083 return 0; | |
3084 } | |
3085 | |
3086 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3087 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3088 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3089 return 0; | |
3090 | |
3091 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3092 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3093 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3094 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3095 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3096 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3097 | |
3098 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3099 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3100 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3101 combination of both. */ | |
3102 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3103 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3104 { | |
3105 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3106 | |
3107 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3108 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3109 return 0; | |
3110 | |
3111 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3112 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3113 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3114 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3115 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3116 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3117 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3118 return 0; | |
3119 | |
3120 delta += 1; | |
3121 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3122 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3123 } | |
3124 | |
3125 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3126 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3127 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3128 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3129 return 0; |
3130 | |
25012 | 3131 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3132 it2 = it; | |
3133 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3134 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3135 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3136 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3137 { | |
3138 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3139 return 0; | |
3140 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3141 } | |
3142 | |
3143 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3144 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3145 | |
3146 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3147 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3148 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3149 | |
3150 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3151 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
3152 safe_bcopy (glyphs, glyphs + n, (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); | |
3153 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); | |
3154 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3155 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3156 | |
3157 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3158 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3159 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3160 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3161 while (glyph < end) | |
3162 { | |
3163 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3164 ++glyph; | |
3165 } | |
3166 | |
3167 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3168 inserted ones. */ | |
3169 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
3170 if (glyph->charpos > 0) | |
3171 glyph->charpos += delta; | |
3172 | |
3173 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3174 { | |
3175 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3176 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3177 } | |
3178 | |
3179 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
3180 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (w->current_matrix, | |
3181 w->cursor.vpos + 1, | |
3182 w->current_matrix->nrows, | |
3183 delta, delta_bytes); | |
3184 | |
3185 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3186 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3187 | |
3188 if (it.show_trailing_whitespace_p) | |
3189 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); | |
3190 | |
3191 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3192 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3193 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3194 and updated_row. */ | |
3195 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3196 update_begin (f); | |
3197 if (rif) | |
3198 { | |
3199 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3200 | |
3201 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3202 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3203 else | |
3204 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3205 } | |
3206 else | |
3207 { | |
3208 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3209 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3210 else | |
3211 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3212 } | |
3213 | |
3214 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3215 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3216 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3217 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3218 | |
3219 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3220 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3221 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3222 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3223 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3224 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3225 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3226 else | |
3227 { | |
3228 int x, y; | |
3229 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3230 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3231 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3232 : 0)); | |
3233 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3234 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3235 } | |
3236 | |
3237 if (rif) | |
3238 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
3239 update_end (f); | |
3240 updated_row = NULL; | |
3241 fflush (stdout); | |
3242 | |
3243 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3244 | |
314 | 3245 unchanged_modified = MODIFF; |
3246 beg_unchanged = GPT - BEG; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3247 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3248 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3249 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3250 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3251 |
25012 | 3252 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3253 return 1; |
3254 } | |
3255 | |
25012 | 3256 |
3257 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3258 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3259 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3260 | |
314 | 3261 int |
3262 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3263 int n; | |
3264 { | |
25012 | 3265 struct frame *f = selected_frame; |
3266 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); | |
3267 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3268 | |
3269 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3270 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3271 return 0; |
25012 | 3272 |
3273 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3274 displaying a message. */ | |
3275 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3276 return 0; | |
3277 | |
3278 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3279 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3280 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3281 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3282 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3283 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3284 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3285 |
25012 | 3286 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3287 | |
3288 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
3289 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3290 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3291 |
25012 | 3292 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
3293 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3294 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3295 |
3296 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3297 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3298 | |
3299 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3300 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3301 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3302 else | |
3303 { | |
3304 int x, y; | |
3305 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3306 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3307 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3308 : 0)); | |
3309 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3310 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3311 } | |
3312 | |
314 | 3313 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3314 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3315 return 1; |
3316 } | |
25012 | 3317 |
3318 | |
314 | 3319 |
25012 | 3320 /*********************************************************************** |
3321 Frame Update | |
3322 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3323 | |
3324 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3325 | |
3326 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3327 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3328 scrolling. | |
3329 | |
3330 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3331 |
3332 int | |
25012 | 3333 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3334 struct frame *f; | |
3335 int force_p; | |
3336 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3337 { | |
3338 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3339 int paused_p; | |
3340 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3341 | |
3342 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3343 { | |
3344 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3345 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3346 | |
3347 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3348 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3349 | |
3350 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3351 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3352 update_begin (f); | |
3353 | |
3354 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3355 support. */ | |
3356 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3357 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3358 | |
3359 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
3360 if (WINDOWP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
3361 { | |
3362 Lisp_Object tem; | |
3363 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window); | |
3364 | |
3365 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3366 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3367 { | |
3368 update_window (w, 1); | |
3369 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3370 | |
3371 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3372 reuse strings. */ | |
3373 tem = f->current_toolbar_string; | |
3374 f->current_toolbar_string = f->desired_toolbar_string; | |
3375 f->desired_toolbar_string = tem; | |
3376 f->n_current_toolbar_items = f->n_desired_toolbar_items; | |
3377 | |
3378 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3379 reuse vectors. */ | |
3380 tem = f->current_toolbar_items; | |
3381 f->current_toolbar_items = f->desired_toolbar_items; | |
3382 f->desired_toolbar_items = tem; | |
3383 } | |
3384 } | |
3385 | |
3386 | |
3387 /* Update windows. */ | |
3388 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3389 update_end (f); | |
3390 display_completed = !paused_p; | |
3391 | |
3392 /* The flush is a performance bottleneck under X. */ | |
3393 #if 0 | |
3394 rif->flush_display (f); | |
3395 #endif | |
3396 } | |
3397 else | |
3398 { | |
3399 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3400 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3401 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3402 | |
3403 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. For windows | |
3404 whose must_be_updated_p flag is set, desired matrices are | |
3405 made part of the desired frame matrix. For other windows, | |
3406 the current matrix is copied. */ | |
3407 build_frame_matrix (f); | |
3408 | |
3409 /* Do the update on the frame desired matrix. */ | |
3410 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); | |
3411 | |
3412 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ | |
3413 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3414 } | |
3415 | |
3416 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3417 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
3418 return paused_p; | |
3419 } | |
3420 | |
3421 | |
3422 | |
3423 /************************************************************************ | |
3424 Window-based updates | |
3425 ************************************************************************/ | |
3426 | |
3427 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3428 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3429 | |
3430 static int | |
3431 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3432 struct window *w; | |
3433 int force_p; | |
3434 { | |
3435 int paused_p = 0; | |
3436 | |
3437 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3438 { | |
3439 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3440 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3441 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3442 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3443 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3444 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3445 | |
3446 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3447 } | |
3448 | |
3449 return paused_p; | |
3450 } | |
3451 | |
3452 | |
3453 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3454 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3455 | |
3456 void | |
3457 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3458 struct window *w; | |
3459 int force_p; | |
3460 { | |
3461 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3462 { | |
3463 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3464 | |
3465 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3466 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3467 | |
3468 /* Update W. */ | |
3469 update_begin (f); | |
3470 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3471 update_end (f); | |
3472 | |
3473 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3474 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3475 } | |
3476 } | |
3477 | |
3478 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3479 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3480 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3481 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3482 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3483 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3484 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3485 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3486 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3487 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3488 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3489 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3490 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3491 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3492 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3493 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3494 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3495 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3496 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3497 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3498 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3499 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3500 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3501 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3502 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3503 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3504 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3505 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3506 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3507 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3508 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3509 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3510 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3511 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3512 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3513 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3514 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3515 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3516 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3517 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3518 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3519 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3520 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3521 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3522 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3523 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3524 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3525 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3526 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3527 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3528 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3529 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3530 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3531 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3532 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3533 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3534 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3535 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3536 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3537 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3538 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3539 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3540 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3541 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3542 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3543 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3544 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3545 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3546 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3547 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3548 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3549 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3550 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3551 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3552 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3553 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3554 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3555 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3556 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3557 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3558 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3559 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3560 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3561 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3562 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3563 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3564 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3565 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3566 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3567 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3568 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3569 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3570 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3571 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3572 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3573 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3574 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3575 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3576 |
25012 | 3577 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3578 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3579 | |
3580 static int | |
3581 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3582 struct window *w; | |
3583 int force_p; | |
3584 { | |
3585 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3586 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3587 int paused_p; | |
3588 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3589 extern int input_pending; | |
3590 extern struct frame *updating_frame; | |
3591 | |
3592 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3593 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3594 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3595 | |
3596 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3597 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3598 force_p = 1; | |
3599 else | |
3600 detect_input_pending (); | |
3601 | |
3602 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3603 the update. */ | |
3604 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3605 { | |
3606 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3607 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
3608 struct glyph_row *top_line_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3609 int yb, changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3610 |
3611 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3612 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3613 | |
3614 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3615 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3616 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3617 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3618 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
3619 top_line_row = row++; | |
3620 | |
3621 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3622 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3623 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3624 { | |
3625 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3626 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
3627 desired_matrix)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3628 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3629 } |
3630 | |
3631 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3632 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3633 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3634 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3635 ++row; | |
3636 | |
3637 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
3638 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
3639 { | |
3640 int rc = scrolling_window (w, top_line_row != NULL); | |
3641 if (rc < 0) | |
3642 { | |
3643 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3644 paused_p = 0; | |
3645 goto set_cursor; | |
3646 } | |
3647 else if (rc > 0) | |
3648 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3649 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3650 } |
3651 | |
3652 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3653 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3654 that can be scrolled. */ | |
3655 if (top_line_row && top_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3656 { | |
3657 top_line_row->y = 0; | |
3658 update_window_line (w, 0); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3659 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3660 } |
3661 | |
3662 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3663 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
3664 if (row->enabled_p | |
3665 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
3666 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
3667 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
3668 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
3669 { | |
3670 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3671 int i; | |
3672 | |
3673 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3674 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3675 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3676 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3677 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3678 detect_input_pending (); | |
3679 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3680 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos); |
25012 | 3681 |
3682 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3683 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3684 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3685 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3686 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3687 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3688 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3689 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3690 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3691 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3692 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3693 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3694 } | |
3695 | |
3696 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3697 paused_p = row < end; | |
3698 | |
3699 set_cursor: | |
3700 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3701 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3702 if (rif->fix_overlapping_area |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3703 && !w->pseudo_window_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3704 && changed_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3705 && !paused_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3706 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3707 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3708 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3709 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3710 |
25012 | 3711 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3712 { | |
3713 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ | |
3714 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3715 | |
3716 #if 0 | |
3717 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This | |
3718 is for debugging only. See the comment around | |
3719 check_matrix_invariants. */ | |
3720 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); | |
3721 #endif | |
3722 } | |
3723 | |
3724 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3725 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3726 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3727 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3728 |
25012 | 3729 /* End of update of window W. */ |
3730 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3731 |
25012 | 3732 } |
3733 else | |
3734 paused_p = 1; | |
3735 | |
3736 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3737 |
25012 | 3738 return paused_p; |
3739 } | |
3740 | |
3741 | |
3742 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3743 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3744 | |
3745 static void | |
3746 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3747 struct window *w; | |
3748 int area, vpos; | |
3749 { | |
3750 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3751 | |
3752 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3753 will be relative to. */ | |
3754 updated_area = area; | |
3755 | |
3756 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3757 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3758 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3759 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3760 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3761 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3762 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3763 } | |
3764 | |
3765 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3766 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3767 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3768 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3769 static int |
25012 | 3770 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3771 struct window *w; | |
3772 int vpos; | |
314 | 3773 { |
25012 | 3774 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3775 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3776 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3777 |
3778 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3779 will be relative to. */ | |
3780 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3781 | |
3782 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3783 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3784 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3785 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3786 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3787 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3788 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3789 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3790 || current_row->overlapped_p |
25012 | 3791 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3792 { | |
3793 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3794 | |
3795 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3796 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3797 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3798 | |
3799 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3800 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3801 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3802 } |
3803 else | |
3804 { | |
3805 int stop, i, x; | |
3806 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3807 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3808 | |
3809 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3810 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3811 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3812 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3813 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3814 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3815 | |
3816 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3817 i = 0; | |
3818 x = desired_row->x; | |
3819 | |
3820 while (i < stop) | |
3821 { | |
3822 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3823 don't have to be written. */ | |
3824 while (i < stop | |
3825 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
3826 { | |
3827 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3828 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3829 } | |
3830 | |
3831 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
3832 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
3833 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
3834 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
3835 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
3836 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
3837 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
3838 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3839 && i > 0 | |
3840 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3841 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3842 { | |
3843 int left, right; | |
3844 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
3845 &left, &right); | |
3846 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
3847 { | |
3848 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
3849 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3850 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3851 } | |
3852 } | |
3853 | |
3854 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
3855 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
3856 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
3857 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
3858 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3859 { | |
3860 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
3861 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
3862 int current_x = x; | |
3863 | |
3864 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
3865 while (i < stop | |
3866 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
3867 && x == current_x) | |
3868 { | |
3869 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3870 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3871 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3872 } | |
3873 | |
3874 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
3875 { | |
3876 i = start_hpos; | |
3877 x = start_x; | |
3878 desired_glyph = start; | |
3879 break; | |
3880 } | |
3881 | |
3882 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
3883 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3884 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3885 } |
3886 } | |
3887 | |
3888 /* Write the rest. */ | |
3889 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3890 { | |
3891 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
3892 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3893 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3894 } |
3895 | |
3896 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
3897 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
3898 { | |
3899 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
3900 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
3901 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
3902 appropriately above. */ | |
3903 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3904 } | |
3905 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
3906 { | |
3907 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
3908 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3909 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
3910 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
3911 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3912 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3913 } |
3914 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
3915 { | |
3916 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
3917 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
3918 int x; | |
3919 | |
3920 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3921 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
3922 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
3923 | |
3924 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
3925 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
3926 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
3927 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
3928 this way. */ | |
3929 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
3930 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3931 { | |
3932 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
3933 x = -1; | |
3934 } | |
3935 else | |
3936 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
3937 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3938 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3939 } |
3940 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3941 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3942 return changed_p; |
25012 | 3943 } |
3944 | |
3945 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3946 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3947 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3948 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3949 static int |
25012 | 3950 update_window_line (w, vpos) |
3951 struct window *w; | |
3952 int vpos; | |
3953 { | |
3954 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
3955 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3956 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3957 |
3958 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
3959 | |
3960 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
3961 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
3962 updated_row = desired_row; | |
3963 | |
3964 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
3965 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
3966 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3967 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3968 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3969 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3970 } |
25012 | 3971 |
3972 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3973 changed_p |= update_text_area (w, vpos); |
25012 | 3974 |
3975 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
3976 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
3977 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3978 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3979 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3980 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3981 } |
25012 | 3982 |
3983 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
3984 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3985 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3986 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
3987 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
3988 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
3989 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
3990 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
3991 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
3992 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
3993 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
3994 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
3995 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
3996 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
3997 | |
3998 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
3999 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4000 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4001 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4002 } |
4003 | |
4004 | |
4005 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4006 be called from update_window. */ | |
4007 | |
4008 static void | |
4009 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4010 struct window *w; | |
4011 { | |
4012 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4013 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4014 | |
4015 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4016 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4017 | |
4018 if ((cursor_in_echo_area | |
4019 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, | |
4020 show the cursor for the message instead of for the | |
4021 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ | |
4022 || (XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w | |
4023 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) | |
4024 && (echo_area_glyphs || STRINGP (echo_area_message)))) | |
4025 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains | |
4026 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4027 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4028 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4029 { | |
4030 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4031 | |
4032 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4033 { | |
4034 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4035 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4036 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4037 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4038 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4039 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4040 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4041 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4042 last_row = NULL; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4043 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0);; ++row) |
25012 | 4044 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4045 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4046 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4047 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4048 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4049 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4050 break; |
25012 | 4051 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4052 |
25012 | 4053 if (last_row) |
4054 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4055 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4056 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4057 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4058 while (last > start && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4059 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4060 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4061 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4062 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4063 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4064 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4065 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4066 |
25012 | 4067 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4068 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4069 } |
4070 } | |
4071 } | |
4072 else | |
4073 { | |
4074 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4075 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4076 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4077 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4078 } | |
4079 | |
4080 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4081 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4082 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4083 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4084 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4085 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4086 } | |
4087 | |
4088 | |
4089 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. | |
4090 TOP_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. | |
4091 | |
4092 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4093 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4094 O(N) time. | |
4095 | |
4096 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4097 | |
4098 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4099 | |
4100 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4101 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4102 | |
4103 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4104 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4105 | |
4106 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4107 forward and backward. | |
4108 | |
4109 Value is | |
4110 | |
4111 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4112 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4113 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4114 | |
4115 static int | |
4116 scrolling_window (w, top_line_p) | |
4117 struct window *w; | |
4118 int top_line_p; | |
4119 { | |
4120 struct symbol | |
4121 { | |
4122 /* Number of occurrences of this line in old and new matrix. */ | |
4123 short old_uses, new_uses; | |
4124 | |
4125 /* Vpos of line in new matrix. */ | |
4126 short new_line_number; | |
4127 | |
4128 /* The line itself. */ | |
4129 struct glyph_row *row; | |
4130 | |
4131 /* Hash collision chain. */ | |
4132 struct symbol *next; | |
4133 }; | |
4134 | |
4135 int SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE = 101; | |
4136 struct symbol **table; | |
4137 struct symbol **old_line_syms, **new_line_syms; | |
4138 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; | |
4139 struct symbol *sym; | |
4140 struct run **runs; | |
4141 int nruns; | |
4142 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4143 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4144 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
4145 | |
4146 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
4147 i = top_line_p ? 1 : 0; | |
4148 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4149 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
4150 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
4151 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4152 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4153 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4154 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
4155 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i))) | |
4156 { | |
4157 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
4158 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4159 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
4160 ++i; | |
4161 } | |
4162 | |
4163 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4164 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4165 return -1; | |
4166 | |
4167 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4168 | |
4169 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4170 desired matrix. */ | |
4171 i = first_new + 1; | |
4172 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4173 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
4174 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4175 ++i; | |
4176 | |
4177 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4178 return 0; | |
4179 | |
4180 last_new = i; | |
4181 | |
4182 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4183 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4184 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4185 disabled. */ | |
4186 i = first_old + 1; | |
4187 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4188 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4189 ++i; | |
4190 last_old = i; | |
4191 | |
4192 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4193 i = last_new; | |
4194 j = last_old; | |
4195 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4196 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4197 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4198 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4199 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4200 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4201 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
4202 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1))) | |
4203 --i, --j; | |
4204 last_new = i; | |
4205 last_old = j; | |
4206 | |
4207 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4208 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4209 return 0; | |
4210 | |
4211 /* Allocate a hash table in which all rows will be inserted. */ | |
4212 table = (struct symbol **) alloca (SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4213 bzero (table, SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4214 | |
4215 /* For each row in the current matrix, record the symbol belonging | |
4216 to the row in OLD_LINE_SYMS. */ | |
4217 old_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (current_matrix->nrows | |
4218 * sizeof *old_line_syms); | |
4219 new_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows | |
4220 * sizeof *new_line_syms); | |
4221 | |
4222 #define ADDSYM(ROW) \ | |
4223 do \ | |
4224 { \ | |
4225 struct glyph_row *row_ = (ROW); \ | |
4226 int i_ = row_->hash % SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE; \ | |
4227 sym = table[i_]; \ | |
4228 while (sym && !row_equal_p (w, sym->row, row_)) \ | |
4229 sym = sym->next; \ | |
4230 if (sym == NULL) \ | |
4231 { \ | |
4232 sym = (struct symbol *) alloca (sizeof *sym); \ | |
4233 sym->row = row_; \ | |
4234 sym->old_uses = sym->new_uses = 0; \ | |
4235 sym->next = table[i_]; \ | |
4236 table[i_] = sym; \ | |
4237 } \ | |
4238 } \ | |
4239 while (0) | |
4240 | |
4241 /* Add current rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4242 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) | |
4243 { | |
4244 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4245 { | |
4246 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); | |
4247 old_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4248 ++sym->old_uses; | |
4249 } | |
4250 else | |
4251 old_line_syms[i] = NULL; | |
4252 } | |
4253 | |
4254 /* Add desired rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4255 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4256 { | |
4257 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4258 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4259 ++sym->new_uses; | |
4260 new_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4261 sym->new_line_number = i; | |
4262 } | |
4263 | |
4264 #undef ADDSYM | |
4265 | |
4266 /* Record in runs which moves were found, ordered by pixel | |
4267 height of copied areas. */ | |
4268 nruns = 0; | |
4269 runs = (struct run **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows * sizeof *runs); | |
4270 | |
4271 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4272 in both matrices. */ | |
4273 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
4274 if (old_line_syms[i] | |
4275 && old_line_syms[i]->old_uses == 1 | |
4276 && old_line_syms[i]->new_uses == 1) | |
4277 { | |
4278 int j, k; | |
4279 int new_line = old_line_syms[i]->new_line_number; | |
4280 struct run *run = (struct run *) alloca (sizeof *run); | |
4281 | |
4282 /* Record move. */ | |
4283 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4284 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4285 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4286 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4287 run->nrows = 1; | |
4288 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4289 | |
4290 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4291 j = i - 1; | |
4292 k = new_line - 1; | |
4293 while (j > first_old | |
4294 && k > first_new | |
4295 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4296 { | |
4297 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4298 --run->current_vpos; | |
4299 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4300 ++run->nrows; | |
4301 run->height += h; | |
4302 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4303 run->current_y -= h; | |
4304 --j, --k; | |
4305 } | |
4306 | |
4307 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4308 j = i + 1; | |
4309 k = new_line + 1; | |
4310 while (j < last_old | |
4311 && k < last_new | |
4312 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4313 { | |
4314 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4315 ++run->nrows; | |
4316 run->height += h; | |
4317 ++j, ++k; | |
4318 } | |
4319 | |
4320 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4321 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4322 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4323 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4324 case. */ | |
4325 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4326 ; | |
4327 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4328 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4329 runs[j] = run; | |
4330 ++nruns; | |
4331 | |
4332 i += run->nrows; | |
4333 } | |
4334 else | |
4335 ++i; | |
4336 | |
4337 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4338 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4339 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4340 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4341 | |
4342 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4343 | A | | B | | |
4344 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4345 | B | | A | | |
4346 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4347 | |
4348 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4349 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4350 | |
4351 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4352 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4353 { | |
4354 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4355 | |
4356 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4357 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4358 { | |
4359 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4360 | |
4361 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4362 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4363 { | |
4364 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4365 | |
4366 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4367 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4368 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4369 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4370 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4371 p->nrows = 0; | |
4372 } | |
4373 } | |
4374 | |
4375 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4376 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4377 { | |
4378 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4379 int to_overlapped_p; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4380 |
25012 | 4381 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4382 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4383 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
4384 assign_row (to, from); | |
4385 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4386 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4387 } |
4388 } | |
4389 | |
4390 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ | |
4391 return 1; | |
4392 } | |
4393 | |
4394 | |
4395 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p TO ON_P for all windows WINDOW in the | |
4396 window tree rooted at W. */ | |
4397 | |
4398 void | |
4399 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) | |
4400 struct window *w; | |
4401 int on_p; | |
4402 { | |
4403 while (w) | |
4404 { | |
4405 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
4406 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); | |
4407 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
4408 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); | |
4409 else | |
4410 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; | |
4411 | |
4412 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
4413 } | |
4414 } | |
4415 | |
4416 | |
4417 | |
4418 /************************************************************************ | |
4419 Frame-Based Updates | |
4420 ************************************************************************/ | |
4421 | |
4422 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4423 | |
4424 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4425 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4426 should not be tried. | |
4427 | |
4428 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4429 | |
4430 static int | |
4431 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4432 struct frame *f; | |
4433 int force_p; | |
4434 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4435 { | |
4436 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4437 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4438 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4439 int i; | |
314 | 4440 int pause; |
4441 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4442 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4443 |
4444 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4445 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4446 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4447 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4448 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4449 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4450 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4451 |
314 | 4452 detect_input_pending (); |
25012 | 4453 if (input_pending && !force_p) |
314 | 4454 { |
4455 pause = 1; | |
4456 goto do_pause; | |
4457 } | |
4458 | |
764 | 4459 update_begin (f); |
314 | 4460 |
25012 | 4461 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4462 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4463 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4464 |
493 | 4465 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4466 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4467 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4468 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4469 break; |
4470 | |
4471 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4472 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4473 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4474 |
4475 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4476 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4477 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4478 | |
4479 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4480 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4481 { |
25012 | 4482 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4483 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4484 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4485 { |
4486 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4487 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4488 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4489 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4490 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4491 if (outq > 900 | |
4492 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4493 { | |
4494 fflush (stdout); | |
4495 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4496 { | |
554 | 4497 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4498 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4499 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4500 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4501 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4502 #endif | |
4503 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4504 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4505 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4506 } |
4507 } | |
4508 } | |
4509 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4510 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4511 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4512 |
25012 | 4513 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4514 } |
4515 } | |
25012 | 4516 |
764 | 4517 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4518 |
4519 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4520 if (!pause) | |
4521 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4522 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4523 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4524 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4525 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4526 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4527 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4528 && (echo_area_glyphs || STRINGP (echo_area_message)))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4529 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4530 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4531 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4532 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4533 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4534 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4535 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4536 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4537 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4538 { |
25012 | 4539 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4540 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4541 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4542 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4543 } |
708 | 4544 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4545 { |
25012 | 4546 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4547 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4548 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4549 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4550 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4551 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4552 { |
25012 | 4553 --row; |
4554 col = 0; | |
4555 | |
4556 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4557 { | |
4558 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4559 must be ignored here. */ | |
4560 int i; | |
4561 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4562 row); | |
4563 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4564 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4565 | |
4566 while (last > start | |
4567 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4568 --last; | |
4569 | |
4570 col = last - start; | |
4571 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4572 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4573 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4574 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4575 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4576 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4577 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4578 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4579 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4580 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4581 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4582 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4583 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4584 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4585 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4586 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4587 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4588 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4589 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4590 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4591 } |
314 | 4592 else |
25012 | 4593 { |
4594 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4595 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4596 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
4597 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0) | |
4598 { | |
4599 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4600 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4601 | |
4602 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4603 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4604 | |
4605 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4606 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4607 } | |
4608 } | |
314 | 4609 } |
4610 | |
764 | 4611 update_end (f); |
314 | 4612 |
4613 if (termscript) | |
4614 fflush (termscript); | |
4615 fflush (stdout); | |
4616 | |
4617 do_pause: | |
4618 | |
4619 display_completed = !pause; | |
25012 | 4620 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4621 return pause; |
4622 } | |
4623 | |
25012 | 4624 |
4625 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4626 |
21514 | 4627 int |
764 | 4628 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4629 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4630 { |
4631 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4632 int window_size; | |
4633 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4634 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4635 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4636 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4637 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4638 register int i; |
764 | 4639 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4640 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4641 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4642 | |
4643 if (!current_matrix) | |
4644 abort (); | |
4645 | |
4646 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4647 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4648 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4649 changed_lines = 0; |
4650 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4651 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4652 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4653 { |
4654 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4655 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4656 return 0; |
25012 | 4657 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4658 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4659 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4660 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4661 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4662 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4663 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4664 } |
314 | 4665 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4666 { |
25012 | 4667 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4668 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4669 } |
314 | 4670 |
4671 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4672 { | |
4673 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4674 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4675 } |
4676 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4677 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4678 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4679 } |
4680 | |
4681 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4682 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4683 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4684 return 1; |
4685 | |
764 | 4686 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4687 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4688 | |
4689 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4690 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4691 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4692 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4693 | |
4694 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4695 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4696 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4697 && (window_size >= |
4698 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4699 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4700 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4701 return 0; | |
4702 | |
25012 | 4703 if (window_size < 2) |
4704 return 0; | |
4705 | |
764 | 4706 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4707 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4708 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4709 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4710 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4711 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4712 | |
4713 return 0; | |
4714 } | |
25012 | 4715 |
4716 | |
4717 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4718 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4719 | |
4720 static int | |
4721 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4722 struct glyph *r; | |
4723 int len; | |
314 | 4724 { |
25012 | 4725 int i; |
4726 | |
4727 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4728 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4729 break; | |
4730 | |
4731 return i; | |
314 | 4732 } |
25012 | 4733 |
4734 | |
4735 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
4736 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
4737 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 4738 |
4739 static int | |
25012 | 4740 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
4741 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 4742 { |
25012 | 4743 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
4744 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
4745 | |
4746 while (p1 < end1 | |
4747 && p2 < end2 | |
4748 && GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*p1) == GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*p2)) | |
4749 ++p1, ++p2; | |
4750 | |
4751 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 4752 } |
4753 | |
25012 | 4754 |
314 | 4755 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 4756 |
314 | 4757 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
4758 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 4759 |
25012 | 4760 |
4761 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
4762 | |
314 | 4763 static void |
25012 | 4764 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
4765 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 4766 int vpos; |
4767 { | |
25012 | 4768 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 4769 int tem; |
4770 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 4771 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4772 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4773 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
4774 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
4775 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
4776 | |
4777 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
4778 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 4779 { |
25012 | 4780 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
4781 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
4782 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 4783 } |
4784 else | |
25012 | 4785 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
4786 | |
4787 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; | |
4788 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 4789 { |
25012 | 4790 /* A line that is not enabled is empty. */ |
4791 obody = 0; | |
314 | 4792 olen = 0; |
4793 } | |
4794 else | |
4795 { | |
25012 | 4796 /* A line not empty in the current matrix. */ |
4797 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); | |
4798 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4799 | |
4800 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 4801 { |
25012 | 4802 /* Ignore trailing spaces. */ |
314 | 4803 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 4804 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 4805 olen--; |
4806 } | |
4807 else | |
4808 { | |
25012 | 4809 /* For an inverse-video line, remember we gave it spaces all |
4810 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video | |
4811 extends all the way across. */ | |
4812 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
4813 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4814 } |
4815 } | |
4816 | |
25012 | 4817 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4818 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4819 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
4820 | |
4821 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
4822 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 4823 { |
4824 nlen = 0; | |
4825 goto just_erase; | |
4826 } | |
4827 | |
25012 | 4828 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
4829 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4830 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
4831 | |
4832 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
4833 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
4834 { | |
4835 cursor_to (vpos, 0); | |
4836 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); | |
4837 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
4838 clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
4839 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
4840 return; | |
4841 } | |
314 | 4842 |
4843 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
4844 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 4845 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 4846 { |
4847 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 4848 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 4849 nlen--; |
4850 } | |
4851 else | |
4852 { | |
25012 | 4853 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
4854 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
4855 all the way across. */ | |
4856 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
4857 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4858 } |
4859 | |
4860 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
4861 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
4862 { | |
25012 | 4863 int i, j; |
4864 | |
4865 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
4866 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 4867 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
4868 { | |
25012 | 4869 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 4870 { |
25012 | 4871 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
4872 j = i + 1; | |
4873 while (j < nlen | |
4874 && (j >= olen | |
4875 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
4876 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
4877 ++j; | |
4878 | |
4879 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 4880 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 4881 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
4882 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 4883 |
4884 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
4885 } | |
4886 } | |
4887 | |
4888 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
4889 if (olen > nlen) | |
4890 { | |
4891 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
4892 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
4893 } | |
4894 | |
25012 | 4895 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
4896 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 4897 return; |
4898 } | |
4899 | |
25012 | 4900 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
4901 characters in a row. */ | |
4902 | |
314 | 4903 if (!olen) |
4904 { | |
25012 | 4905 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
4906 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
4907 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
4908 nsp = 0; | |
4909 else | |
4910 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
4911 | |
314 | 4912 if (nlen > nsp) |
4913 { | |
4914 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
4915 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
4916 } | |
4917 | |
764 | 4918 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 4919 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 4920 return; |
4921 } | |
4922 | |
4923 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 4924 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
4925 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
4926 | |
4927 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
4928 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
4929 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 4930 |
4931 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
4932 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
4933 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
4934 { | |
4935 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 4936 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
4937 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 4938 } |
4939 | |
4940 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
4941 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 4942 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 4943 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
4944 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
4945 | |
4946 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
4947 op1 = obody + olen; | |
4948 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
4949 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 4950 while (op1 > op2 |
4951 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 4952 { |
4953 op1--; | |
4954 np1--; | |
4955 } | |
4956 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
4957 | |
4958 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
4959 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
4960 Is it worth it? */ | |
4961 | |
4962 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
4963 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 4964 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 4965 endmatch = 0; |
4966 | |
4967 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
4968 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
4969 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
4970 Is it worth it? */ | |
4971 | |
4972 if (nsp != osp | |
4973 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 4974 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 4975 { |
4976 begmatch = 0; | |
4977 endmatch = 0; | |
4978 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
4979 } | |
4980 | |
4981 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
4982 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
4983 | |
4984 if (osp > nsp) | |
4985 { | |
4986 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
4987 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
4988 } | |
4989 else if (nsp > osp) | |
4990 { | |
4991 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
4992 and insert earlier in the line, | |
4993 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
4994 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
4995 { | |
4996 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
4997 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
4998 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
4999 } | |
5000 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5001 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5002 } |
5003 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5004 | |
5005 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5006 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5007 { | |
5008 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5009 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5010 { | |
5011 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5012 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5013 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5014 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5015 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5016 olen = 0; |
5017 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5018 } | |
5019 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5020 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5021 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5022 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5023 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5024 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5025 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5026 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5027 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5028 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5029 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5030 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5031 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5032 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5033 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5034 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5035 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5036 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5037 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5038 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5039 olen = nlen; |
5040 } | |
5041 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5042 { | |
5043 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5044 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5045 olen = nlen; | |
5046 } | |
5047 } | |
5048 | |
5049 just_erase: | |
5050 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5051 if (olen > nlen) | |
5052 { | |
5053 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5054 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5055 } | |
5056 | |
764 | 5057 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5058 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5059 } |
25012 | 5060 |
5061 | |
314 | 5062 |
25012 | 5063 /*********************************************************************** |
5064 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5065 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5066 | |
5067 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5068 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5069 boundaries. */ | |
5070 | |
5071 int | |
5072 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5073 struct window *w; | |
5074 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5075 { |
25012 | 5076 struct it it; |
5077 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5078 struct text_pos startp; | |
5079 int left_area_width; | |
5080 | |
5081 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5082 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5083 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5084 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5085 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5086 | |
5087 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5088 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5089 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5090 | |
5091 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5092 *y = it.current_y; | |
5093 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5094 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5095 } | |
5096 | |
5097 | |
5098 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5099 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5100 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5101 the string returned. */ | |
5102 | |
5103 Lisp_Object | |
5104 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5105 struct window *w; | |
5106 int x, y; | |
5107 int *charpos; | |
5108 { | |
5109 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5110 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5111 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5112 int x0; | |
5113 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5114 | |
5115 /* Only do this for frames under a window system. */ | |
5116 if (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
9650
4295137050dd
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p):
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9572
diff
changeset
|
5117 return Qnil; |
25012 | 5118 |
5119 if (mode_line_p) | |
5120 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5121 else | |
5122 row = MATRIX_TOP_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5123 | |
5124 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5125 { |
25012 | 5126 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5127 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5128 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5129 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5130 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
5131 x += FRAME_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); | |
5132 | |
5133 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5134 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5135 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5136 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5137 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5138 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5139 { | |
5140 string = glyph->object; | |
5141 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5142 break; | |
5143 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5144 } |
25012 | 5145 |
5146 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5147 } |
25012 | 5148 |
5149 | |
5150 /*********************************************************************** | |
5151 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5152 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5153 |
5154 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5155 |
493 | 5156 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5157 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5158 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5159 { |
5160 int width, height; | |
5161 extern int errno; | |
5162 int old_errno = errno; | |
5163 | |
764 | 5164 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5165 |
764 | 5166 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5167 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5168 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5169 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5170 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5171 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5172 | |
5173 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5174 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5175 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5176 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5177 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5178 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5179 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5180 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1); |
314 | 5181 break; |
5182 } | |
5183 } | |
5184 } | |
5185 | |
5186 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5187 errno = old_errno; | |
5188 } | |
5189 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5190 | |
5191 | |
764 | 5192 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. */ |
314 | 5193 |
21514 | 5194 void |
314 | 5195 do_pending_window_change () |
5196 { | |
5197 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
5198 while (delayed_size_change) | |
5199 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5200 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5201 |
5202 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5203 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5204 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5205 { |
25012 | 5206 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5207 |
764 | 5208 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5209 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5210 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5211 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5212 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0); |
314 | 5213 } |
5214 } | |
5215 } | |
5216 | |
5217 | |
764 | 5218 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5219 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5220 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5221 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5222 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5223 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5224 from a signal handler. */ |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5225 |
21514 | 5226 void |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5227 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay) |
25012 | 5228 register struct frame *f; |
21514 | 5229 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5230 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5231 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5232 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5233 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5234 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5235 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5236 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5237 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5238 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5239 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5240 pretend, delay); |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5241 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5242 else |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5243 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay); |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5244 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5245 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5246 static void |
25012 | 5247 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay) |
5248 register struct frame *f; | |
11914
b1a014bdd22c
(change_frame_size_1): Declare arg DELAY.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11858
diff
changeset
|
5249 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay; |
314 | 5250 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5251 int new_frame_window_width; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5252 unsigned int total_glyphs; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5253 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5254 |
314 | 5255 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5256 if (delay) |
314 | 5257 { |
25012 | 5258 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5259 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5260 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5261 return; | |
5262 } | |
5263 | |
764 | 5264 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5265 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5266 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5267 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5268 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5269 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5270 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5271 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5272 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5273 | |
5274 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5275 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5276 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5277 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5278 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5279 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5280 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5281 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5282 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5283 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5284 return; |
5285 | |
15078 | 5286 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5287 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5288 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5289 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5290 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5291 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5292 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5293 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5294 |
25012 | 5295 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5296 { |
25012 | 5297 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5298 { |
25012 | 5299 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5300 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5301 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5302 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5303 (newheight | |
5304 - 1 | |
5305 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5306 0); | |
5307 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5308 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5309 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5310 } |
5311 else | |
764 | 5312 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5313 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5314 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5315 | |
5316 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5317 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5318 } |
5319 | |
25012 | 5320 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5321 { |
25012 | 5322 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5323 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5324 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5325 | |
5326 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5327 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5328 |
5329 if (WINDOWP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
5330 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window)->width, newwidth); | |
314 | 5331 } |
5332 | |
25012 | 5333 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5334 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5335 | |
5336 { | |
5337 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5338 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5339 | |
5340 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5341 &text_area_height); | |
5342 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5343 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5344 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5345 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5346 } | |
5347 | |
5348 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5349 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5350 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5351 |
5352 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5353 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5354 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5355 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5356 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5357 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5358 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5359 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5360 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5361 } |
25012 | 5362 |
5363 | |
314 | 5364 |
25012 | 5365 /*********************************************************************** |
5366 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5367 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5368 | |
5369 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5370 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5371 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5372 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5373 (file) | |
5374 Lisp_Object file; | |
5375 { | |
5376 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5377 termscript = 0; | |
5378 | |
5379 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5380 { | |
5381 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5382 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5383 if (termscript == 0) | |
5384 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5385 } | |
5386 return Qnil; | |
5387 } | |
5388 | |
5389 | |
314 | 5390 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5391 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5392 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5393 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5394 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5395 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5396 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5397 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5398 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5399 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5400 fflush (stdout); |
5401 if (termscript) | |
5402 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5403 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5404 termscript); |
314 | 5405 fflush (termscript); |
5406 } | |
5407 return Qnil; | |
5408 } | |
5409 | |
25012 | 5410 |
314 | 5411 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5412 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5413 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5414 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5415 (arg) | |
5416 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5417 { | |
493 | 5418 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5419 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5420 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5421 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5422 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5423 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5424 fflush (stdout); |
5425 } | |
5426 else | |
5427 bitch_at_user (); | |
5428 | |
5429 return Qnil; | |
5430 } | |
5431 | |
21514 | 5432 void |
314 | 5433 bitch_at_user () |
5434 { | |
5435 if (noninteractive) | |
5436 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5437 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5438 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5439 else | |
5440 ring_bell (); | |
5441 fflush (stdout); | |
5442 } | |
5443 | |
25012 | 5444 |
5445 | |
5446 /*********************************************************************** | |
5447 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5448 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5449 | |
314 | 5450 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5451 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5452 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5453 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5454 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5455 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5456 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5457 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5458 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5459 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5460 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5461 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5462 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5463 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5464 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5465 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5466 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5467 | |
5468 #ifdef LISP_FLOAT_TYPE | |
5469 { | |
5470 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5471 sec = (int) duration; | |
5472 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5473 } | |
5474 #else | |
5475 CHECK_NUMBER (seconds, 0); | |
5476 sec = XINT (seconds); | |
5477 #endif | |
314 | 5478 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5479 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5480 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5481 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5482 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5483 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5484 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5485 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5486 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5487 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5488 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5489 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5490 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5491 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5492 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5493 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5494 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5495 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5496 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5497 return Qnil; |
5498 | |
650 | 5499 { |
5500 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5501 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5502 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5503 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5504 } | |
587 | 5505 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5506 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5507 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5508 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5509 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5510 immediate_quit = 1; |
5511 QUIT; | |
5512 | |
5513 #ifdef VMS | |
5514 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5515 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5516 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5517 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5518 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5519 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5520 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5521 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5522 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5523 |
314 | 5524 while (1) |
5525 { | |
554 | 5526 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5527 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5528 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5529 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5530 break; |
5531 } | |
5532 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5533 sleep (sec); | |
5534 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5535 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5536 | |
5537 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5538 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5539 | |
5540 return Qnil; | |
5541 } | |
5542 | |
25012 | 5543 |
650 | 5544 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5545 it does the redisplay. | |
5546 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5547 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5548 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5549 |
5550 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5551 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5552 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5553 { |
650 | 5554 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5555 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5556 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5557 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5558 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5559 return Qnil; |
650 | 5560 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5561 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5562 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5563 | |
673 | 5564 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5565 return Qt; | |
5566 | |
314 | 5567 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5568 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5569 #endif |
5570 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5571 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5572 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5573 | |
314 | 5574 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5575 } | |
5576 | |
25012 | 5577 |
650 | 5578 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5579 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5580 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5581 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5582 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5583 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5584 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5585 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5586 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5587 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5588 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5589 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5590 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5591 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5592 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5593 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5594 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5595 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5596 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5597 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5598 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5599 | |
5600 #ifdef LISP_FLOAT_TYPE | |
5601 { | |
5602 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5603 sec = (int) duration; | |
5604 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5605 } | |
5606 #else | |
5607 CHECK_NUMBER (seconds, 0); | |
5608 sec = XINT (seconds); | |
5609 #endif | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5610 |
650 | 5611 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5612 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5613 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5614 #endif |
5615 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5616 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5617 } |
25012 | 5618 |
5619 | |
314 | 5620 |
25012 | 5621 /*********************************************************************** |
5622 Other Lisp Functions | |
5623 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5624 | |
5625 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5626 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5627 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5628 add length checks). */ | |
5629 | |
5630 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5631 | |
5632 | |
5633 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5634 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5635 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5636 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5637 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5638 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5639 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5640 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5641 the current state.\n") | |
5642 () | |
5643 { | |
5644 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5645 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5646 int n; | |
5647 | |
5648 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5649 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5650 { | |
5651 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5652 goto changed; | |
5653 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5654 goto changed; | |
5655 } | |
5656 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5657 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5658 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5659 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
5660 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
5661 { | |
5662 buf = XCONS (XCONS (tail)->car)->cdr; | |
5663 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ | |
5664 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5665 continue; | |
5666 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5667 goto changed; | |
5668 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5669 goto changed; | |
5670 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5671 goto changed; | |
5672 } | |
5673 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5674 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5675 return Qnil; | |
5676 changed: | |
5677 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5678 n = 1; | |
5679 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5680 n += 2; | |
5681 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
5682 n += 3; | |
5683 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5684 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5685 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5686 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5687 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5688 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5689 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5690 { | |
5691 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5692 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5693 } | |
5694 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
5695 { | |
5696 buf = XCONS (XCONS (tail)->car)->cdr; | |
5697 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ | |
5698 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5699 continue; | |
5700 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5701 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5702 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5703 } | |
5704 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5705 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5706 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5707 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5708 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5709 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5710 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5711 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5712 abort (); | |
5713 return Qt; | |
5714 } | |
5715 | |
5716 | |
5717 | |
5718 /*********************************************************************** | |
5719 Initialization | |
5720 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5721 | |
314 | 5722 char *terminal_type; |
5723 | |
25012 | 5724 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
5725 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
5726 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 5727 |
21514 | 5728 void |
314 | 5729 init_display () |
5730 { | |
5731 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
5732 extern int display_arg; | |
5733 #endif | |
5734 | |
25012 | 5735 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
5736 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
5737 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
5738 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
5739 | |
314 | 5740 meta_key = 0; |
5741 inverse_video = 0; | |
5742 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
5743 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
5744 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5745 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5746 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5747 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 5748 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5749 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5750 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5751 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5752 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5753 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5754 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5755 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 5756 |
5757 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5758 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5759 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5760 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5761 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5762 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5763 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5764 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5765 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5766 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5767 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 5768 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5769 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5770 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5771 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5772 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5773 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5774 ) |
314 | 5775 { |
5776 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
5777 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
5778 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
5779 #else | |
5780 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
5781 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5782 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5783 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 5784 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5785 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5786 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5787 #endif |
25012 | 5788 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 5789 return; |
5790 } | |
5791 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
5792 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5793 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5794 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5795 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
5796 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5797 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 5798 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5799 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5800 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5801 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5802 |
314 | 5803 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
5804 if (! isatty (0)) | |
5805 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5806 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 5807 exit (1); |
5808 } | |
5809 | |
5810 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
5811 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
5812 if (!terminal_type) | |
5813 { | |
5814 #ifdef VMS | |
5815 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
5816 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
5817 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
5818 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
5819 #else | |
5820 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
5821 #endif | |
5822 exit (1); | |
5823 } | |
5824 | |
5825 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 5826 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 5827 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
5828 { | |
5829 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
5830 char *p; | |
5831 | |
5832 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
5833 | |
5834 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
5835 if (isupper (*p)) | |
5836 *p = tolower (*p); | |
5837 | |
5838 terminal_type = new; | |
5839 } | |
25012 | 5840 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 5841 |
5842 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 5843 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5844 { |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5845 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (selected_frame); |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5846 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (selected_frame); |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5847 |
25012 | 5848 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
5849 | |
5850 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
5851 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
5852 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5853 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5854 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5855 |
25012 | 5856 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
764 | 5857 calculate_costs (selected_frame); |
314 | 5858 |
5859 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
5860 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
5861 if (initialized) | |
5862 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
5863 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5864 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 5865 |
5866 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
5867 if (initialized | |
5868 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5869 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5870 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5871 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5872 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5873 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5874 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
5875 #endif |
25012 | 5876 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
5877 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); | |
314 | 5878 } |
25012 | 5879 |
5880 | |
314 | 5881 |
25012 | 5882 /*********************************************************************** |
5883 Blinking cursor | |
5884 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5885 | |
5886 DEFUN ("show-cursor", Fshow_cursor, Sshow_cursor, 0, 2, 0, | |
5887 "Change visibility flag of the text cursor of WINDOW.\n\ | |
5888 ON_P nil means toggle the flag. Otherwise, ON_P must be an integer,\n\ | |
5889 and the flag is set according to the value of ON_P. WINDOW nil or\n\ | |
5890 omitted means use the selected window. The new cursor state takes effect\n\ | |
5891 with the next redisplay.") | |
5892 (on_p, window) | |
5893 Lisp_Object on_p, window; | |
5894 { | |
5895 struct window *w; | |
5896 | |
5897 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
5898 output routines. */ | |
5899 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
5900 { | |
5901 if (NILP (window)) | |
5902 window = selected_window; | |
5903 else | |
5904 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
5905 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
5906 | |
5907 if (NILP (on_p)) | |
5908 w->cursor_off_p = !w->cursor_off_p; | |
5909 else | |
5910 { | |
5911 CHECK_NUMBER (on_p, 1); | |
5912 w->cursor_off_p = XINT (on_p) != 0; | |
5913 } | |
5914 } | |
5915 | |
5916 return Qnil; | |
5917 } | |
5918 | |
5919 | |
5920 | |
5921 /*********************************************************************** | |
5922 Initialization | |
5923 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5924 | |
21514 | 5925 void |
314 | 5926 syms_of_display () |
5927 { | |
764 | 5928 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 5929 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5930 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 5931 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
5932 defsubr (&Sding); | |
5933 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
5934 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
5935 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
25012 | 5936 defsubr (&Sshow_cursor); |
314 | 5937 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
5938 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5939 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5940 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5941 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5942 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5943 |
314 | 5944 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
5945 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 5946 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
5947 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 5948 |
314 | 5949 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 5950 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 5951 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 5952 |
314 | 5953 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 5954 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 5955 |
314 | 5956 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 5957 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 5958 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 5959 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 5960 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 5961 |
314 | 5962 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
5963 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
5964 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 5965 |
314 | 5966 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
5967 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
5968 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 5969 |
314 | 5970 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
5971 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 5972 |
314 | 5973 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 5974 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 5975 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
5976 Each element can be:\n\ | |
5977 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
5978 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
5979 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 5980 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 5981 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
5982 | |
5983 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
5984 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
5985 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
5986 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
5987 | |
25012 | 5988 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
5989 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
5990 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
5991 | |
314 | 5992 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
5993 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
5994 if (noninteractive) | |
5995 #endif | |
5996 { | |
5997 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
5998 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
5999 } | |
6000 } |